blob: d39fd6838f41cadd2ecbcea8a94653acf361b8aa [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02009 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070010 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050019#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020025#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020026#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070027
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040028/**
29 * DOC: Introduction
30 *
31 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34 * drivers.
35 */
36
37/**
38 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
39 *
40 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070041 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
42 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
43 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010044 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
45 * tasklet function.
46 *
47 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070048 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 */
50
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051/**
52 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070053 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040054 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
55 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
56 */
57
58/**
59 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070060 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040061 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
62 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
63 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
64 * hardware.
65 *
66 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
67 *
68 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
69 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
70 *
71 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
72 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070073 */
74
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020075/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040076 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010090/**
91 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
92 *
93 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
94 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
95 * between different stations/interfaces.
96 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
97 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
98 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
99 *
100 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
101 * driver operation.
102 *
103 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
104 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105 *
106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
110 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
111 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100112 *
113 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
114 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
115 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
116 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
117 * .release_buffered_frames().
118 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
119 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
120 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
121 */
122
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500123struct device;
124
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400125/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200126 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
127 *
128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100129 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200130 */
131enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100133 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200134};
135
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200136#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
137
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200138/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800139 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
144 */
145enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
146 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
147 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
149 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
150};
151
152/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400157 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400165 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200167 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200170 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300171 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200172 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173};
174
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100182/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100205 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100222 bool radar_enabled;
223
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225};
226
227/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200295 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300303 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
304 * keep alive) changed.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700305 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
306 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100307 */
308enum ieee80211_bss_change {
309 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
310 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
311 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300312 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
317 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
318 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200325 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300326 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100328 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100330 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100331 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200332 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300333 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700334 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200335
336 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100337};
338
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300339/*
340 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
341 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
342 * filtering will be disabled.
343 */
344#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
345
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200347 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
348 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200349 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300350 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300351 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
352 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
353 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700354 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200355enum ieee80211_event_type {
356 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200357 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300358 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300359 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200360};
361
362/**
363 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
364 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
365 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
366 */
367enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700368 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
369 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
370};
371
372/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200373 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200374 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
375 */
376struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
377 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
378};
379
380/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200381 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
382 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200383 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200384 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
385 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200386 */
387enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
388 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200389 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200390 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
391 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200392};
393
394/**
395 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
396 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
397 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
398 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
399 */
400enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
401 MLME_SUCCESS,
402 MLME_DENIED,
403 MLME_TIMEOUT,
404};
405
406/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200407 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200408 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
409 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
410 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
411 */
412struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
413 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
414 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
415 u16 reason;
416};
417
418/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300419 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
420 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
421 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300422 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300423 */
424struct ieee80211_ba_event {
425 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
426 u16 tid;
427 u16 ssn;
428};
429
430/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200431 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200432 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200433 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200434 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300435 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 */
438struct ieee80211_event {
439 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
440 union {
441 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200442 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300443 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200444 } u;
445};
446
447/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200448 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
449 *
450 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
451 *
452 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
453 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
454 */
455struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
456 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
457 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
458};
459
460/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100461 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
462 *
463 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
464 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
465 *
466 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200467 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
468 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530469 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100470 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
471 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200472 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
473 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100474 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200475 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300476 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200477 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100478 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
479 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
480 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
481 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200482 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200483 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
484 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200485 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100486 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
487 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200488 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
489 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
490 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700491 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800492 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200493 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
494 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
495 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300496 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100497 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200498 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
499 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100500 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
501 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200502 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100503 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300504 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
505 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
506 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200507 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200508 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
509 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
510 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100511 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
512 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
513 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
514 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200515 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300516 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
517 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
518 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
519 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100520 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
521 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
522 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200523 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200524 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
525 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
526 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300527 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
528 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200529 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300530 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
531 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200532 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100533 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
534 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
535 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
536 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
537 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
538 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100539 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200540 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
541 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
542 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300543 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
544 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
545 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
546 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
547 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
548 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
549 * station.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100550 */
551struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200552 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100553 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200554 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530555 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100556 u16 aid;
557 /* erp related data */
558 bool use_cts_prot;
559 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300560 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200561 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800562 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700563 u16 beacon_int;
564 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200565 u64 sync_tsf;
566 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100567 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100568 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300569 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200570 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200571 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200572 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
573 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100574 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
575 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100576 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200577 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300578 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100579 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200580 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200581 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300582 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300583 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
584 size_t ssid_len;
585 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200586 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100587 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100588 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200589 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300590 u16 max_idle_period;
591 bool protected_keep_alive;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100592};
593
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800594/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200595 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800596 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700597 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800598 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100599 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
601 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
602 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
603 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
604 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
605 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
606 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
607 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
608 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
609 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
610 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200612 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
613 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200618 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200619 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
620 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
621 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
622 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
623 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
624 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
625 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
626 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
628 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
629 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300630 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
631 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
633 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
634 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600635 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
636 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
637 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100638 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
639 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
640 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
642 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200643 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
644 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
646 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
647 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
649 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
650 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
651 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100652 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
653 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
654 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100655 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
656 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
657 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
659 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
660 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200662 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
663 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100664 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
665 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
666 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
667 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200668 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
669 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
670 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
672 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
673 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200674 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
675 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
676 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200677 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
678 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530679 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
680 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
681 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200682 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
683 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
684 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530685 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
686 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
687 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
688 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
689 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200690 *
691 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
692 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800693 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200694enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
699 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
703 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
705 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
706 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600708 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100709 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200710 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200711 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100714 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100715 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200716 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400717 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200718 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200720 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530721 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200722 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530723 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200724 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530725 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200726};
727
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200728#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
729
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200730/**
731 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
732 *
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
734 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
736 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200740 *
741 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
742 */
743enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
744 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530745 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100746 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100747 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200748 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200749};
750
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200751/*
752 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
753 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
754 */
755#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
756 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
757 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
758 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
759 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100760 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200761 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200762 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200763
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530764/**
765 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
766 * Rate Control algorithm.
767 *
768 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
769 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
770 *
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
773 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
774 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100776 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
777 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530778 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
779 * Greenfield mode.
780 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100781 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
783 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530784 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
785 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
786 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
787 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
788 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200789enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
790 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
791 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
792 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
793
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100794 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200795 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
796 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
797 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
798 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
799 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100800 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
801 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
802 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800803};
804
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200805
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200806/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
807#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200808
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200809/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
810#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
811
812/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200813#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200814
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200815/* maximum number of rate table entries */
816#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
817
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200818/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200819 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200820 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200821 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
822 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200823 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200824 *
825 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
826 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
827 *
828 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
829 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200830 *
831 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
832 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
833 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
834 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300835 * information::
836 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200837 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300838 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200839 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
840 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
841 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
842 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300843 * information should then contain::
844 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200845 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300846 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200847 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
848 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200849 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200850struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
851 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100852 u16 count:5,
853 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000854} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200855
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100856#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
857
858static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
859 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
860{
861 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200862 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
863 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100864}
865
866static inline u8
867ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
868{
869 return rate->idx & 0xF;
870}
871
872static inline u8
873ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
874{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200875 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100876}
877
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200878/**
879 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200880 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200881 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
882 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
883 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
884 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
885 *
886 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200887 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200888 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100889 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700890 * @control: union for control data
891 * @status: union for status data
892 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100893 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700894 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100895 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700896 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200897 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200898 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200899struct ieee80211_tx_info {
900 /* common information */
901 u32 flags;
902 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200903
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200904 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100905
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100906 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100907
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200908 union {
909 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200910 union {
911 /* rate control */
912 struct {
913 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
914 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
915 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200916 u8 use_rts:1;
917 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200918 u8 short_preamble:1;
919 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200920 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200921 };
922 /* only needed before rate control */
923 unsigned long jiffies;
924 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200925 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200926 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200927 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200928 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200929 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200930 } control;
931 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200932 u64 cookie;
933 } ack;
934 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200935 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200936 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200937 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100938 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200939 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300940 u16 tx_time;
Venkateswara Naralasettya78b26f2018-02-13 11:04:46 +0530941 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300942 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200943 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200944 struct {
945 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
946 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200947 u8 pad[4];
948
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200949 void *rate_driver_data[
950 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
951 };
952 void *driver_data[
953 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200954 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700955};
956
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300957/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200958 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
959 *
960 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
961 * @info: Basic tx status information
962 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
963 */
964struct ieee80211_tx_status {
965 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
966 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
967 struct sk_buff *skb;
968};
969
970/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200971 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
972 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200973 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
974 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
975 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200976 *
977 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
978 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
979 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
980 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
981 */
982struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200983 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
984 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200985 const u8 *common_ies;
986 size_t common_ie_len;
987};
988
989
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200990static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
991{
992 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
993}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400994
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200995static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
996{
997 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
998}
999
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001000/**
1001 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1002 *
1003 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1004 *
1005 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1006 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1007 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1008 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1009 *
1010 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1011 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1012 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1013 */
1014static inline void
1015ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1016{
1017 int i;
1018
1019 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1020 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1021 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1022 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1023 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1024 /* clear the rate counts */
1025 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1026 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1027
1028 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001029 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001030 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1031 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1032 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1033}
1034
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001035
1036/**
1037 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1038 *
1039 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1040 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1041 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1042 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001043 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1044 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001045 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001046 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1047 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001048 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1049 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1050 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1051 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001052 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1053 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001054 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1055 * the frame.
1056 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1057 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001058 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001059 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1060 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1061 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001062 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1063 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1064 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001065 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1066 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001067 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1068 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001069 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1070 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1071 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001072 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1073 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1074 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1075 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1076 * on this subframe
1077 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1078 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001079 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1080 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001081 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1082 * processing it in any regular way.
1083 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1084 * them for sniffing purposes.
1085 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1086 * monitor interfaces.
1087 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1088 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001089 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1090 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1091 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1092 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1093 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1094 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1095 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1096 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1097 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001098 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1099 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1100 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001101 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1102 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1103 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001104 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1105 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001106 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1107 * frame
1108 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001109 */
1110enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001111 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1112 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001113 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001114 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1115 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1116 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1117 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001118 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001119 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1120 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1121 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1122 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1123 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1124 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1125 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1126 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1127 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1128 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1129 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1130 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1131 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1132 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1133 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1134 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001135 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1136 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001137};
1138
1139/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001140 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001142 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001143 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1144 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1145 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1146 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1147 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1148 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1149 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001150 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001151 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001152enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1153 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001154 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1155 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1156 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1157 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1158 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001159};
1160
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001161#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1162
1163enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1164 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1165 RX_ENC_HT,
1166 RX_ENC_VHT,
1167};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001168
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001169/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001170 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1171 *
1172 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1173 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001174 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001175 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001176 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1177 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001178 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1179 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001180 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1181 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001182 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001183 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001184 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1185 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001186 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1187 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1188 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001189 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1190 * values were filled.
1191 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1192 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001193 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001194 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001195 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001196 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001197 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001198 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1199 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001200 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001201 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001202 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1203 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1204 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001205 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001206struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1207 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001208 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001209 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001210 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001211 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001212 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001213 u8 enc_flags;
1214 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001215 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001216 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001217 u8 rx_flags;
1218 u8 band;
1219 u8 antenna;
1220 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001221 u8 chains;
1222 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001223 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001224};
1225
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001226/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001227 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1228 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1229 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1230 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1231 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1232 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1233 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1234 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1235 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1236 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1237 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1238 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1239 * @data field.
1240 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1241 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1242 * length
1243 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1244 *
1245 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1246 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1247 * data.
1248 */
1249struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1250 u32 present;
1251 u8 align;
1252 u8 oui[3];
1253 u8 subns;
1254 u8 pad;
1255 u16 len;
1256 u8 data[];
1257} __packed;
1258
1259/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001260 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1261 *
1262 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1263 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001264 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1265 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1266 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001267 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1268 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1269 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1270 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1271 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1272 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1273 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1275 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1276 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1277 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1278 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001279 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1280 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001281 */
1282enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001283 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001284 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001285 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001286 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001287};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001288
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001289
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001290/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001291 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1292 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001293 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001294 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001295 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001296 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001297 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001298 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001299 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001300 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001301 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1302 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001303 */
1304enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001305 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001306 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001307 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001308 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001309 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1310 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1311 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001312 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001313};
1314
1315/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001316 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1317 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001318 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1319 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1320 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1321 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1322 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001323 */
1324enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1325 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1326 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1327 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1328 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1329
1330 /* keep last */
1331 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1332};
1333
1334/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001335 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1336 *
1337 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1338 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001339 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1340 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001341 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001342 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1343 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1344 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001345 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1346 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1347 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1348 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001349 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1350 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001351 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001352 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001353 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001354 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001355 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001356 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1357 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001358 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001359 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1360 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001361 *
1362 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1363 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001364 * configured for an HT channel.
1365 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1366 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001367 */
1368struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001369 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001370 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001371
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001372 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001373 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001374
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001375 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1376
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001377 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001378 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001379 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001380};
1381
1382/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001383 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1384 *
1385 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1386 * operation.
1387 *
1388 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1389 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1390 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1391 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001392 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1393 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001394 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1395 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001396 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001397 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1398 */
1399struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1400 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001401 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001402 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001403 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001404 u8 count;
1405};
1406
1407/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001408 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1409 *
1410 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1411 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001412 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1413 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1414 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1415 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001416 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1417 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1418 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1419 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001420 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1421 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1422 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001423 */
1424enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1425 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001426 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001427 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001428 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001429};
1430
1431/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001432 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1433 *
1434 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1435 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1436 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001437 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001438 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1439 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001440 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001441 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1442 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001443 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1444 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1445 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001446 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001447 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1448 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1449 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1450 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001451 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1452 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001453 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1454 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1455 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1456 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1457 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001458 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001459 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001460 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001461 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1462 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001463 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001464 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001465 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001466 */
1467struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001468 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001469 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001470 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001471 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001472 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001473 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001474
1475 u8 cab_queue;
1476 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1477
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001478 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1479
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001480 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1481
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001482 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001483
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001484#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1485 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1486#endif
1487
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001488 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1489
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001490 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001491 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001492};
1493
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001494static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1495{
1496#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001497 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001498#endif
1499 return false;
1500}
1501
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001502/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001503 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1504 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1505 *
1506 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1507 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1508 *
1509 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1510 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1511 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1512 */
1513struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1514
1515/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001516 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1517 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1518 *
1519 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1520 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1521 *
1522 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1523 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1524 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1525 */
1526struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1527
1528/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001529 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1530 *
1531 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1532 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1533 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001534 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1535 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001536 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1537 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001538 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1539 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1540 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001541 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1542 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001543 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001544 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1545 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001546 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001547 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001548 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001549 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1550 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1551 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001552 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1553 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1554 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1555 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1556 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1557 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1558 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001559 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001560 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001561 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001562 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1563 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1564 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001565 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1566 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1567 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001568 */
1569enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001570 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1571 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1572 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1573 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1574 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1575 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1576 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001577 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001578 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001579};
1580
1581/**
1582 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1583 *
1584 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1585 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1586 *
1587 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1588 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001589 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001590 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001591 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1592 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001593 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1594 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1595 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001596 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1597 * data block:
1598 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1599 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1600 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001601 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1602 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001603 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001604struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001605 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001606 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001607 u8 icv_len;
1608 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001609 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001610 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001611 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001612 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001613 u8 key[0];
1614};
1615
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001616#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1617
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001618#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1619#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1620
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001621/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001622 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1623 *
1624 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1625 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1626 * reverse order than in packet)
1627 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1628 * reverse order than in packet)
1629 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1630 * reverse order than in packet)
1631 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1632 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001633 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001634 */
1635struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1636 union {
1637 struct {
1638 u32 iv32;
1639 u16 iv16;
1640 } tkip;
1641 struct {
1642 u8 pn[6];
1643 } ccmp;
1644 struct {
1645 u8 pn[6];
1646 } aes_cmac;
1647 struct {
1648 u8 pn[6];
1649 } aes_gmac;
1650 struct {
1651 u8 pn[6];
1652 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001653 struct {
1654 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1655 u8 seq_len;
1656 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001657 };
1658};
1659
1660/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001661 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1662 *
1663 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1664 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1665 *
1666 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1667 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1668 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1669 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1670 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1671 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1672 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1673 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1674 * key_idx value calculation:
1675 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1676 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1677 */
1678struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1679 u32 cipher;
1680 u16 iftype;
1681 u8 hdr_len;
1682 u8 pn_len;
1683 u8 pn_off;
1684 u8 key_idx_off;
1685 u8 key_idx_mask;
1686 u8 key_idx_shift;
1687 u8 mic_len;
1688};
1689
1690/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001691 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1692 *
1693 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1694 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1695 *
1696 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1697 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1698 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001699enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001700 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001701};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001702
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001703/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001704 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1705 *
1706 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1707 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1708 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1709 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1710 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1711 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1712 */
1713enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1714 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1715 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1716 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1717 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1718 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1719 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1720};
1721
1722/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001723 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1724 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1725 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1726 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1727 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1728 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1729 *
1730 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1731 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1732 */
1733enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1734 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1735 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1736 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1737 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1738};
1739
1740/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001741 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1742 *
1743 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001744 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001745 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1746 */
1747struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1748 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1749 struct {
1750 s8 idx;
1751 u8 count;
1752 u8 count_cts;
1753 u8 count_rts;
1754 u16 flags;
1755 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1756};
1757
1758/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001759 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1760 *
1761 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1762 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1763 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1764 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1765 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001766 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001767 *
1768 * @addr: MAC address
1769 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001770 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001771 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1772 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001773 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1774 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1775 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001776 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1777 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001778 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001779 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001780 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001781 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1782 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001783 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001784 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001785 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1786 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1787 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1788 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001789 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001790 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001791 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001792 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1793 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301794 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001795 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1796 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1797 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001798 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001799 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001800 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001801 */
1802struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001803 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001804 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1805 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001806 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001807 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001808 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001809 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001810 u8 uapsd_queues;
1811 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001812 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001813 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001814 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001815 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001816 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001817 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301818 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001819 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001820
1821 /**
1822 * @max_amsdu_len:
1823 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1824 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1825 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1826 *
1827 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1828 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1829 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1830 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1831 *
1832 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1833 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1834 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1835 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001836 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001837 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001838 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001839
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001840 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1841
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001842 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001843 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001844};
1845
1846/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001847 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1848 *
1849 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301850 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001851 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001852 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1853 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1854 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001855enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001856 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1857};
1858
1859/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001860 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1861 *
1862 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1863 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1864 */
1865struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1866 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1867};
1868
1869/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001870 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1871 *
1872 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1873 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1874 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1875 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001876 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001877 *
1878 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1879 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1880 */
1881struct ieee80211_txq {
1882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1883 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1884 u8 tid;
1885 u8 ac;
1886
1887 /* must be last */
1888 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1889};
1890
1891/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001892 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1893 *
1894 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1895 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1896 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1897 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1898 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1899 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001900 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1901 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1902 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1903 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1904 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1905 * algorithm.
1906 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1907 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1908 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1909 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1910 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1911 * CCK frames.
1912 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001913 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1914 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1915 * the FCS at the end.
1916 *
1917 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1918 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1919 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1920 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1921 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1922 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001923 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001924 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001925 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1926 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1927 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1928 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1929 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001930 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1931 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1932 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1933 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1934 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001935 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1936 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1937 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301938 *
1939 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1940 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001941 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001942 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1943 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1944 *
1945 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1946 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1947 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1948 *
1949 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1950 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001951 *
1952 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1953 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001954 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301955 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1956 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1957 * the stack.
1958 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001959 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001960 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1961 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001962 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1964 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1965 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1968 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1969 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1970 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1971 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1972 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001973 *
1974 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1975 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1976 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1977 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1978 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1979 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001980 *
1981 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1982 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1983 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001984 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1986 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1987 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001988 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001989 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1990 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1991 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1992 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1994 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1995 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1996 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1997 * supported cipher suites.
1998 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2000 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2001 * for frames.
2002 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002003 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2004 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2005 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2006 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002007 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002008 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2009 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2010 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002011 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2012 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2013 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002014 *
2015 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2016 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002017 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002018 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2019 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2020 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2021 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002022 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2023 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2024 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2025 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002026 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002027 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2028 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2029 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002030 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002031 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002032 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002033 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2034 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2035 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002036 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2037 * within A-MPDU.
2038 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002039 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2040 * for sent beacons.
2041 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002042 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2043 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2044 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2045 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2046 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002047 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2048 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2049 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2050 * timeout.
2051 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002052 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2053 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2054 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002055 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2056 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2057 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2058 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2059 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2060 *
2061 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2062 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2063 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302064 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2065 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2066 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2067 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2068 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002069 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2070 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2071 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2072 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002073 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2074 * TDLS links.
2075 *
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002076 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2077 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2078 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2079 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2080 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2081 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2082 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2083 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002084 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002085 */
2086enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002087 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2088 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2089 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2090 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2092 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2093 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2094 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2095 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2096 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2097 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2098 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2099 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2100 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2101 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2102 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2103 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2104 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2105 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2106 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2107 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2108 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2109 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2110 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2111 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2112 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2113 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2114 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2115 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002116 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002117 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002118 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002119 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002120 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002121 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002122 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2123 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302124 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002125 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002126 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002127 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002128
2129 /* keep last, obviously */
2130 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002131};
2132
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002133/**
2134 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002135 *
2136 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2137 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2138 *
2139 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2140 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2141 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002142 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2143 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002144 *
2145 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2146 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002147 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2148 * along with this structure.
2149 *
2150 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2151 *
2152 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2153 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2154 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002155 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2156 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002157 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002158 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002159 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002160 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002161 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002162 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002163 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002164 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002165 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2166 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2167 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002168 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2169 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2170 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002171 *
2172 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2173 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002174 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2175 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002176 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2177 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002178 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2179 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002180 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002181 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2182 * can handle.
2183 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2184 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002185 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002186 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002187 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2188 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2189 * aggregation.
2190 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2191 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2192 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002193 *
2194 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002195 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2196 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2197 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2198 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002199 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002200 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2201 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2202 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002203 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2204 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002205 *
2206 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2207 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002208 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002209 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002210 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002211 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2212 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002213 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002214 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002215 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2216 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2217 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2218 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2219 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2220 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2221 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2222 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002223 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002224 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2225 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002226 *
2227 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2228 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2229 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2230 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2231 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2232 * neither enabled.
2233 *
2234 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2235 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2236 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002237 *
2238 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2239 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2240 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002241 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2242 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002243 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002244struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002245 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002246 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002247 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002248 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002249 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002250 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002251 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002252 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002253 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002254 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002255 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002256 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002257 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002258 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002259 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002260 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002261 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002262 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002263 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002264 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002265 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002266 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002267 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002268 struct {
2269 int units_pos;
2270 s16 accuracy;
2271 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002272 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002273 u8 uapsd_queues;
2274 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002275 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2276 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002277 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002278};
2279
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002280static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2281 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2282{
2283 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2284}
2285#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2286
2287static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2288 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2289{
2290 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2291}
2292#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2293
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002294/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002295 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2296 *
2297 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2298 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2299 */
2300struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2301 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2302
2303 /* Keep last */
2304 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2305};
2306
2307/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002308 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2309 *
2310 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2311 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2312 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2313 * @status: channel-switch response status
2314 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2315 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2316 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2317 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2318 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2319 */
2320struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2321 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2322 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2323 u8 action_code;
2324 u32 status;
2325 u32 timestamp;
2326 u16 switch_time;
2327 u16 switch_timeout;
2328 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2329 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2330};
2331
2332/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002333 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2334 *
2335 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2336 *
2337 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2338 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2339 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2340 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2341 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002342 *
2343 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002344 */
2345struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2346
2347/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002348 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2349 *
2350 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2351 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2352 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002353static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2354{
2355 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2356}
2357
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002358/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002359 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002360 *
2361 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2362 * @addr: the address to set
2363 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002364static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002365{
2366 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2367}
2368
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002369static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2370ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002371 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002372{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002373 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002374 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002375 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002376}
2377
2378static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2379ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002380 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002381{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002382 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002383 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002384 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002385}
2386
2387static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2388ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002389 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002390{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002391 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002392 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002393 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002394}
2395
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002396/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002397 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2398 * @hw: the hardware
2399 * @skb: the skb
2400 *
2401 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2402 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2403 */
2404void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2405
2406/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002407 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002408 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002409 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2410 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2411 *
2412 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2413 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002414 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2415 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2416 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002417 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2418 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2419 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002420 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2421 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2422 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2423 *
2424 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2425 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2426 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2427 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2428 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002429 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2430 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2431 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2432 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2433 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002434 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2435 *
2436 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2437 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2438 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2439 * based on the receive flags.
2440 *
2441 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2442 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2443 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2444 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002445 *
2446 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2447 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2448 * handler.
2449 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002450 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002451 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2452 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002453 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002454 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002455 *
2456 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2457 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2458 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002459 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002460
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002461/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002462 * DOC: Powersave support
2463 *
2464 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2465 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002466 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2467 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2468 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2469 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2470 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2471 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2472 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2473 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002474 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002475 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2476 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2477 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002478 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2479 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002480 *
2481 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2482 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2483 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002484 *
2485 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2486 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2487 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2488 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002489 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2490 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002491 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002492 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002493 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2494 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2495 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2496 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2497 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2498 * periods.
2499 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002500 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002501 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2502 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2503 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2504 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2505 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2506 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2507 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2508 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2509 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2510 *
2511 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002512 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002513 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002514 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2515 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2516 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2517 *
2518 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2519 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002520 */
2521
2522/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002523 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2524 *
2525 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002526 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002527 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2528 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2529 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2530 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2531 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2532 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002533 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2534 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002535 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2536 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2537 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2538 *
2539 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2540 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2541 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2542 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2543 *
2544 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2545 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2546 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2547 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002548 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002549 * - a list of information element IDs
2550 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2551 *
2552 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2553 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2554 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2555 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2556 * vendor information elements.
2557 *
2558 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2559 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2560 *
2561 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2562 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2563 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2564 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2565 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2566 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2567 *
2568 *
2569 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2570 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2571 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2572 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2573 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2574 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2575 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2576 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2577 *
2578 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2579 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2580 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002581 */
2582
2583/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002584 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2585 *
2586 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2587 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2588 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2589 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2590 *
2591 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2592 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2593 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2594 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2595 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2596 * hardware flags.
2597 *
2598 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2599 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2600 * turned off otherwise.
2601 *
2602 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2603 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2604 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2605 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2606 */
2607
2608/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 * DOC: Frame filtering
2610 *
2611 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2612 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2613 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2614 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2615 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2616 *
2617 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2618 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2619 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2620 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002621 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2622 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2623 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2624 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2625 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2626 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2627 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002628 *
2629 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2630 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2631 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2632 * or dropped.
2633 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002634 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2635 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2636 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2637 * the flag, but not clear it.
2638 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2639 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2640 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2641 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2642 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2643 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2644 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2645 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002646 */
2647
2648/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002649 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2650 *
2651 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2652 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2653 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2654 *
2655 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2656 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2657 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2658 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2659 * the driver code.
2660 *
2661 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2662 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2663 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2664 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2665 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2666 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2667 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2668 *
2669 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2670 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2671 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2672 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2673 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2674 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2675 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2676 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2677 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2678 * @sta_notify callback.
2679 *
2680 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2681 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2682 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2683 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2684 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2685 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2686 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002687 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002688 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2689 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2690 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2691 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2692 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2693 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2694 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002695 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2696 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2697 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002698 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2699 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2700 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2701 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2702 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2703 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2704 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2705 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2706 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2707 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2708 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2709 *
2710 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2711 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2712 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2713 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2714 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2715 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2716 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2717 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2718 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2719 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002720 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002721 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2722 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2723 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2724 *
2725 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2726 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2727 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2728 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2729 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002730 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002731 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2732 *
2733 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2734 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2735 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2736 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002737 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002738 *
2739 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2740 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2741 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2742 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002743 */
2744
2745/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002746 * DOC: HW queue control
2747 *
2748 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2749 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2750 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2751 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2752 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2753 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2754 *
2755 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2756 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2757 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2758 *
2759 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2760 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2761 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2762 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2763 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2764 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2765 * the hardware queue.
2766 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2767 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2768 *
2769 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2770 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2771 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2772 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2773 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2774 *
2775 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2776 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2777 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2778 * off-channel queue: 9
2779 *
2780 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2781 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2782 *
2783 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2784 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2785 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2786 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2787 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2788 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2789 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2790 *
2791 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2792 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2793 *
2794 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2795 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2796 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2797 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2798 */
2799
2800/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002801 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2802 *
2803 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2804 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2805 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2806 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2807 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002808 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2809 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2810 * multicast address.
2811 *
2812 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2813 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2814 *
2815 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2816 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2817 *
2818 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2819 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2820 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2821 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2822 * honour this flag if possible.
2823 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002824 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2825 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002826 *
2827 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002828 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002829 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002830 *
2831 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002832 */
2833enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002834 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2835 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2836 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2837 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2838 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2839 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002840 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002841 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002842};
2843
2844/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002845 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2846 *
2847 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2848 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002849 *
2850 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2851 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002852 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002853 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2854 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002855 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2856 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2857 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002858 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002859 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2860 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2861 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2862 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2863 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2864 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2865 * session is gone and removes the station.
2866 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2867 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2868 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2869 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002870 */
2871enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2872 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2873 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002874 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002875 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2876 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2877 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002878 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002879};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002880
2881/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002882 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2883 *
2884 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2885 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2886 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2887 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2888 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2889 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2890 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2891 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2892 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2893 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2894 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2895 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2896 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2897 */
2898struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2899 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2900 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2901 u16 tid;
2902 u16 ssn;
2903 u8 buf_size;
2904 bool amsdu;
2905 u16 timeout;
2906};
2907
2908/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002909 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2910 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002911 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2912 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002913 */
2914enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2915 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002916 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002917};
2918
2919/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002920 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2921 *
2922 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002923 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2924 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2925 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002926 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002927 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2928 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2929 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002930 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2931 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002932 */
2933enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2934 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2935 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002936 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002937 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002938};
2939
2940/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002941 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2942 *
2943 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2944 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2945 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2946 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2947 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2948 *
2949 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2950 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2951 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2952 */
2953enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2954 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2955 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2956};
2957
2958/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002959 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2960 *
2961 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2962 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2963 *
2964 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2965 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2966 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2967 * of wowlan configuration)
2968 */
2969enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2970 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2971 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2972};
2973
2974/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002975 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2976 *
2977 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2978 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2979 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2980 *
2981 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2982 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2983 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002984 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002985 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002986 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002987 *
2988 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2989 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2990 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2991 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2992 * or zero.
2993 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2994 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2995 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002996 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002997 *
2998 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2999 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3000 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3001 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003002 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3003 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003004 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003005 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003006 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3007 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3008 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3009 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3010 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02003011 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3012 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3013 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3014 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003015 *
3016 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3017 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3018 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3019 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3020 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3021 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003022 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3023 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3024 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3025 * in suspend().
3026 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003027 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003028 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003029 * and @stop must be implemented.
3030 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3031 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3032 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3033 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3034 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003035 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003036 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003037 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3038 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3039 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3040 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3041 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3042 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003043 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3044 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3045 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3046 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3047 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3048 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3049 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003050 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003051 *
3052 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3053 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003054 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003055 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003056 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003057 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3058 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3059 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3060 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3061 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003062 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3063 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003064 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003065 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3066 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3067 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3068 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003069 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3070 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003071 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003072 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003073 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3074 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3075 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3076 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3077 * which flags are changed.
3078 * This callback can sleep.
3079 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003080 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003081 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003082 *
3083 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003084 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3085 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003086 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003087 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003088 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003089 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003090 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3091 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3092 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003093 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003094 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003095 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3096 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3097 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3098 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3099 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3100 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003101 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3102 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3103 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3104 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003105 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003106 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003107 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3108 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003109 * that power save is disabled.
3110 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3111 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3112 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3113 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3114 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3115 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3116 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003117 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003118 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003119 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3120 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3121 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3122 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3123 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3124 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3125 * The callback can sleep.
3126 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003127 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3128 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3129 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3130 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3131 *
3132 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003133 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003134 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003135 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3136 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003137 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3138 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3139 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003140 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003141 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3142 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3143 * this notification.
3144 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003145 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003146 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3147 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003148 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003149 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003150 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3151 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3152 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003153 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003154 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003155 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003156 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3157 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3158 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003159 * The callback can sleep.
3160 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003161 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003162 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003163 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003164 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3165 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3166 *
3167 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003168 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3169 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3170 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3171 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3172 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003173 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303174 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3175 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003176 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3177 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303178 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003179 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003180 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3181 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3182 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003183 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003184 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3185 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3186 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3187 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003188 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3189 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3190 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3191 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3192 * The callback can sleep.
3193 *
3194 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3195 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3196 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3197 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3198 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003199 * The callback can sleep.
3200 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003201 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3202 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3203 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3204 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3205 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3206 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3207 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003208 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3209 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3210 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003211 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003212 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3213 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3214 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3215 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3216 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3217 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3218 * The callback can sleep.
3219 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003220 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003221 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003222 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003223 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003224 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003225 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003226 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003227 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003228 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003229 *
3230 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003231 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003232 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003233 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003234 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003235 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3236 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3237 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3238 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3239 * The callback can sleep.
3240 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003241 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3242 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3243 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3244 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003245 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003246 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003247 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3248 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3249 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003250 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003251 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003252 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003253 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3254 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003255 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3256 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3257 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003258 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003259 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003260 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3261 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003262 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3263 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3264 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003265 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003266 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3267 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003268 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003269 *
3270 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003271 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3272 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3273 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3274 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003275 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003276 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003277 *
3278 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3279 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3280 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3281 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003282 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003283 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3284 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3285 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3286 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3287 *
3288 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003289 *
3290 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3291 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3292 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3293 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3294 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3295 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003296 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003297 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3298 * must be accepted in this case.
3299 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003300 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3301 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003302 *
3303 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3304 *
3305 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303306 *
3307 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3308 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303309 *
3310 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3311 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3312 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003313 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3314 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003315 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003316 *
3317 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3318 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3319 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3320 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003321 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003322 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3323 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3324 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3325 * more-data bit must always be set.
3326 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3327 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003328 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3329 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3330 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3331 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3332 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3333 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003334 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3335 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3336 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003337 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3338 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003339 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003340 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003341 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003342 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3343 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3344 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003345 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003346 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3347 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3348 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3349 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003350 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003351 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003352 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3353 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3354 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003355 *
3356 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3357 *
3358 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3359 *
3360 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3361 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3362 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003363 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3364 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3365 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3366 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3367 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3368 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3369 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3370 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3371 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02003372 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3373 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3374 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003375 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3376 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3377 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003378 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003379 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3380 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3381 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3382 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3383 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3384 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3385 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3386 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3387 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003388 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303389 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003390 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303391 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003392 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3393 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3394 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303395 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003396 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3397 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303398 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003399 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3400 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303401 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003402 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3403 * another, as specified in the list of
3404 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3405 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303406 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003407 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003408 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3409 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3410 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3411 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3412 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3413 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3414 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003415 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003416 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3417 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3418 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3419 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3420 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003421 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003422 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3423 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3424 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003425 *
3426 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3427 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3428 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003429 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003430 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3431 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003432 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003433 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003434 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3435 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003436 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3437 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003438 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003439 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003440 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3441 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3442 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003443 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003444 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3445 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3446 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3447 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003448 *
3449 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3450 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3451 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003452 *
3453 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3454 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003455 *
3456 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3457 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3458 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3459 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3460 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3461 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3462 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3463 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3464 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003465 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3466 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3467 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3468 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3469 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3470 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3471 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003472 *
3473 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003474 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3475 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3476 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3477 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003478 *
3479 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3480 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003481 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3482 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3483 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3484 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3485 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3486 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003487 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3488 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3489 * this call.
3490 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3491 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3492 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003493 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003494struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003495 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3496 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3497 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003498 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003499 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003500#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3501 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3502 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003503 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003504#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003505 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003507 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3508 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003509 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003510 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003511 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003512 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003513 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3514 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3515 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3516 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003517
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003518 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3519 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3520
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003521 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003522 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003523 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3524 unsigned int changed_flags,
3525 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003526 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003527 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3529 unsigned int filter_flags,
3530 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003531 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3532 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003533 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003534 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003535 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003536 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003537 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3538 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3540 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003541 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3542 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3543 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003544 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3545 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003546 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003547 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003548 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003550 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3551 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3552 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003553 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003554 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003556 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3558 const u8 *mac_addr);
3559 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003561 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3562 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003563 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3564 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3565 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003566 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003567 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003568 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3569 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3570 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3571 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303572#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3573 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3574 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3575 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3576 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303577#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003578 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003579 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003580 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3581 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3582 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3583 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003584 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3586 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003587 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3590 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003591 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3592 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3593 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003594 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3595 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3596 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3597 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003598 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003600 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003601 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3602 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3603 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003604 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3605 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003606 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003607 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003608
3609 /**
3610 * @ampdu_action:
3611 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3612 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3613 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3614 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3615 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3616 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3617 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3618 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3619 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3620 *
3621 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3622 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3623 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3624 *
3625 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3626 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3627 *
3628 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3629 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3630 * - ``TX: 81``
3631 *
3632 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3633 *
3634 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3635 * The callback can sleep.
3636 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003637 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003639 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003640 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3641 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003642 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003643 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003644#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003645 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3646 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003647 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3648 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3649 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003650#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003651 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3652 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003653 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003655 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003656 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3657 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003658
3659 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003660 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003661 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003662 int duration,
3663 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003664 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003665 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3666 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303668 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303669 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3670 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003671 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3672 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3673 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003674
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003675 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3676 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3677 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3678 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3679 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003680 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3681 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3682 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3683 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3684 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003685
3686 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3688 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3689 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3690 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3691 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3692 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3693 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003694
3695 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3696 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003697
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003698 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3699 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3700
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003701 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3702 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3703 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3704 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3705 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3707 u32 changed);
3708 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3709 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3710 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3711 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3713 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003714 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3715 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3716 int n_vifs,
3717 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003718
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003719 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3720 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003721
3722#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3723 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3725 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3726#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003727 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3729 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003730 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3732 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003733
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003734 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3736
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003737 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3738 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003739 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3740 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003741 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3742 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003743
3744 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3745 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3746 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3747 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003748 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003749 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3751 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003752 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3754 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003755
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003756 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3757 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003758 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003759
3760 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3762 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3763 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3764 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003765 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3766 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3767 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003768 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3769 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3770 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3771 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3772 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3773 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003774};
3775
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003776/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003777 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3778 *
3779 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3780 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3781 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3782 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3783 * @priv_data_len.
3784 *
3785 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3786 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3787 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3788 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3789 *
3790 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3791 */
3792struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3793 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3794 const char *requested_name);
3795
3796/**
3797 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003798 *
3799 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3800 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3801 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3802 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3803 * @priv_data_len.
3804 *
3805 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3806 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003807 *
3808 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003809 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003810static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003811struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003812 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3813{
3814 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3815}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003816
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003817/**
3818 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3819 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003820 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3821 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3822 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003823 *
3824 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003825 *
3826 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003827 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003828int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3829
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003830/**
3831 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3832 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3833 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3834 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3835 */
3836struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3837 int throughput;
3838 int blink_time;
3839};
3840
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003841/**
3842 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3843 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3844 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3845 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3846 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3847 */
3848enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3849 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3850 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3851 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3852};
3853
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003854#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003855const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3856const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3857const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3858const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3859const char *
3860__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3861 unsigned int flags,
3862 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3863 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003864#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003865/**
3866 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3867 *
3868 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3869 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3870 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3871 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3872 *
3873 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003874 *
3875 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003876 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003877static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003878{
3879#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3880 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3881#else
3882 return NULL;
3883#endif
3884}
3885
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003886/**
3887 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3888 *
3889 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3890 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3891 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3892 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3893 *
3894 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003895 *
3896 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003897 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003898static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003899{
3900#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3901 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3902#else
3903 return NULL;
3904#endif
3905}
3906
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003907/**
3908 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3909 *
3910 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3911 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3912 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3913 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3914 *
3915 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003916 *
3917 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003918 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003919static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003920{
3921#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3922 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3923#else
3924 return NULL;
3925#endif
3926}
3927
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003928/**
3929 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3930 *
3931 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3932 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3933 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3934 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3935 *
3936 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003937 *
3938 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003939 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003940static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003941{
3942#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3943 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3944#else
3945 return NULL;
3946#endif
3947}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003948
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003949/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003950 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3951 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003952 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003953 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3954 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3955 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003956 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3957 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3958 *
3959 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003960 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003961static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003962ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003963 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3964 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3965{
3966#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003967 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003968 blink_table_len);
3969#else
3970 return NULL;
3971#endif
3972}
3973
3974/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003975 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3976 *
3977 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3978 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3979 *
3980 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3981 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003982void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3983
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003984/**
3985 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3986 *
3987 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3988 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003989 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003990 *
3991 * @hw: the hardware to free
3992 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003993void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3994
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003995/**
3996 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3997 *
3998 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3999 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4000 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4001 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4002 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4003 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4004 *
4005 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4006 */
4007void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4008
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01004009/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004010 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004011 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004012 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4013 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4014 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4015 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4016 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4017 *
4018 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4019 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4020 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4021 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4022 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4023 *
4024 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4025 *
4026 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004027 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004028 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4029 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004030 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004031void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4032 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004033
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004034/**
4035 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4036 *
4037 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004038 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4039 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4040 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4041 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004042 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004043 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004044 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4045 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004046 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4047 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004048 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004049 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004051 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4052 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004053 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004054static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4055{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004056 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004057}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004058
4059/**
4060 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4061 *
4062 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004063 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4064 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004065 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004066 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4067 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004068 *
4069 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4070 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004071 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004072void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004073
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004074/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004075 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4076 *
4077 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4078 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4079 *
4080 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004081 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4082 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004083 *
4084 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4085 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4086 */
4087static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4088 struct sk_buff *skb)
4089{
4090 local_bh_disable();
4091 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4092 local_bh_enable();
4093}
4094
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004095/**
4096 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4097 *
4098 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4099 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4100 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4101 *
4102 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4103 *
4104 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4105 * each other.
4106 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004107 * @sta: currently connected sta
4108 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004109 *
4110 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004111 */
4112int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4113
4114/**
4115 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4116 * (in process context)
4117 *
4118 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4119 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4120 * applies.
4121 *
4122 * @sta: currently connected sta
4123 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004124 *
4125 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004126 */
4127static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4128 bool start)
4129{
4130 int ret;
4131
4132 local_bh_disable();
4133 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4134 local_bh_enable();
4135
4136 return ret;
4137}
4138
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004139/**
4140 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4141 * @sta: currently connected station
4142 *
4143 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4144 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4145 * connected station was received.
4146 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4147 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4148 * be serialized.
4149 */
4150void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4151
4152/**
4153 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4154 * @sta: currently connected station
4155 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4156 *
4157 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4158 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4159 * from a connected station was received.
4160 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4161 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4162 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004163 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4164 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4165 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4166 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004167 */
4168void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4169
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004170/*
4171 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4172 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4173 */
Felix Fietkau651b9922018-02-10 13:20:34 +01004174#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004175
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004176/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004177 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004178 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004179 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4180 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004181 *
4182 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004183 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4184 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004185 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004186 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4187 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4188 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4189 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4190 *
4191 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4192 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4193 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4194 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4195 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4196 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4197 *
4198 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4199 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4200 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4201 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4202 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004203 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004204void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4205 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004206
4207/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004208 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4209 *
4210 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4211 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4212 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4213 *
4214 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4215 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4216 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4217 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4218 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4219 */
4220void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4222 struct sk_buff *skb,
4223 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4224 int max_rates);
4225
4226/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004227 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4228 *
4229 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4230 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4231 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4232 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4233 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4234 * slow stations to starve).
4235 *
4236 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4237 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4238 */
4239void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4240 u32 thr);
4241
4242/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004243 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4244 *
4245 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4246 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4247 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4248 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004249 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4250 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004251 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004252 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4253 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004254 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004255 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4256 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004257 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004258void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004259 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004260
4261/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004262 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4263 *
4264 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4265 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4266 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4267 *
4268 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4269 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4270 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4271 *
4272 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4273 * @status: tx status information
4274 */
4275void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4277
4278/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004279 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4280 *
4281 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4282 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4283 * specific skbs.
4284 *
4285 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4286 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4287 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4288 *
4289 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4290 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4291 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4292 * @info: tx status information
4293 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004294static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4295 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4296 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4297{
4298 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4299 .sta = sta,
4300 .info = info,
4301 };
4302
4303 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4304}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004305
4306/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004307 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4308 *
4309 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4310 *
4311 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4312 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4313 * for a single hardware.
4314 *
4315 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4316 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4317 */
4318static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4319 struct sk_buff *skb)
4320{
4321 local_bh_disable();
4322 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4323 local_bh_enable();
4324}
4325
4326/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004327 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004328 *
4329 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4330 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4331 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004332 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4333 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004334 *
4335 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4336 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004337 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004338void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004339 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004340
4341/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004342 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4343 *
4344 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4345 * connected STA.
4346 *
4347 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4348 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4349 */
4350void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4351
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004352#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4353
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004354/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004355 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4356 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4357 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004358 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4359 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4360 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004361 */
4362struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4363 u16 tim_offset;
4364 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004365
4366 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004367};
4368
4369/**
4370 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4371 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4373 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4374 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4375 *
4376 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4377 * obtain the beacon template.
4378 *
4379 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4380 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004381 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4382 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004383 *
4384 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4385 *
4386 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4387 */
4388struct sk_buff *
4389ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4391 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4392
4393/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004394 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4395 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004396 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004397 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4398 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4399 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4400 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4401 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4402 *
4403 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004404 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004405 *
4406 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4407 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004408 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4409 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004410 *
4411 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004412 *
4413 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004414 */
4415struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4417 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4418
4419/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004420 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4421 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004422 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004423 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004424 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004425 *
4426 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004427 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004428static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4429 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4430{
4431 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4432}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004433
4434/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004435 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4436 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4437 *
4438 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4439 * This function is called implicitly when
4440 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4441 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4442 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4443 *
4444 * Return: new csa counter value
4445 */
4446u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4447
4448/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004449 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4450 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4451 *
4452 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004453 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004454 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4455 */
4456void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4457
4458/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004459 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004460 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4461 *
4462 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4463 */
4464bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4465
4466
4467/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004468 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4469 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4470 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4471 *
4472 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4473 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4474 *
4475 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004476 *
4477 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004478 */
4479struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4481
4482/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004483 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4484 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4485 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4486 *
4487 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4488 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4489 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4490 *
4491 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4492 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004493 *
4494 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004495 */
4496struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4498
4499/**
4500 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4501 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4502 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004503 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4504 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004505 *
4506 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4507 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4508 * BSSID and address is used.
4509 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004510 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4511 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4512 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004513 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4514 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004515 *
4516 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004517 */
4518struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4520 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004521
4522/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004523 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4524 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004525 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004526 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4527 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004528 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004529 *
4530 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4531 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004532 *
4533 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004534 */
4535struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004536 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004537 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004538 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004539
4540/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004541 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4542 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004543 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004544 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4545 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004546 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004547 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4548 *
4549 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4550 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4551 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4552 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4553 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004554void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004555 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004556 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004557 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4558
4559/**
4560 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4561 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004562 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004563 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004564 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004565 *
4566 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4567 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4568 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004569 *
4570 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004571 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004572__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004574 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004575
4576/**
4577 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4578 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004579 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004580 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4581 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004582 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004583 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4584 *
4585 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4586 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4587 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4588 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4589 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004590void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004592 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004593 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004594 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4595
4596/**
4597 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4598 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004599 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004600 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004601 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004602 *
4603 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4604 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4605 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004606 *
4607 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004608 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004609__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4610 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004611 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004612 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004613
4614/**
4615 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4616 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004617 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004618 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004619 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004620 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004621 *
4622 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4623 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004624 *
4625 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004626 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004627__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004629 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004630 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004631 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004632
4633/**
4634 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4635 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004636 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004637 *
4638 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4639 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4640 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4641 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004642 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4643 *
4644 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4645 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004646 *
4647 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4648 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4649 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4650 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4651 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4652 * use common code for all beacons.
4653 */
4654struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004655ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004656
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004657/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004658 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4659 *
4660 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4661 *
4662 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4663 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4664 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4665 */
4666void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4667 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4668
4669/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004670 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004671 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004672 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4673 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004674 *
4675 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004676 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4677 * with this P1K
4678 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004679 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004680static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4681 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4682{
4683 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4684 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4685 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4686
4687 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4688}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004689
4690/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004691 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4692 *
4693 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4694 * and transmitter address.
4695 *
4696 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4697 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4698 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4699 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4700 */
4701void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4702 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4703
4704/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004705 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4706 *
4707 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4708 * in the packet.
4709 *
4710 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4711 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4712 * encrypted with this key
4713 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4714 */
4715void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4716 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004717
4718/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004719 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4720 *
4721 * @pos: start of crypto header
4722 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4723 * @pn: PN to add
4724 *
4725 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4726 * the packet payload)
4727 *
4728 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4729 * point to the crypto header)
4730 */
4731u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4732
4733/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004734 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4735 *
4736 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004737 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004738 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4739 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4740 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4741 *
4742 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4743 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4744 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4745 *
4746 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4747 * can be done concurrently.
4748 */
4749void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4750 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4751
4752/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004753 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4754 *
4755 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004756 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004757 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4758 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4759 * @seq: new sequence data
4760 *
4761 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4762 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4763 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4764 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4765 *
4766 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4767 * can be done concurrently.
4768 */
4769void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4770 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4771
4772/**
4773 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4774 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4775 *
4776 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4777 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4778 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4779 *
4780 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4781 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4782 */
4783void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4784
4785/**
4786 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4787 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4788 * @keyconf: new key data
4789 *
4790 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4791 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4792 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4793 *
4794 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4795 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4796 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4797 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4798 *
4799 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4800 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4801 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4802 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4803 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4804 * of the reconfiguration.
4805 *
4806 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4807 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4808 *
4809 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4810 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4811 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4812 * the key that's being replaced.
4813 */
4814struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4815ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4816 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4817
4818/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004819 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4820 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4821 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4822 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4823 * @gfp: allocation flags
4824 */
4825void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4826 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4827
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004828/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004829 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4830 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4831 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4832 *
4833 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4834 */
4835void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4836
4837/**
4838 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4839 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4840 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4841 *
4842 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4843 */
4844void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4845
4846/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004847 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4848 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4849 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4850 *
4851 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004852 *
4853 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004854 */
4855
4856int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4857
4858/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004859 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4860 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4861 *
4862 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4863 */
4864void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4865
4866/**
4867 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4868 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869 *
4870 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4871 */
4872void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4873
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004874/**
4875 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4876 *
4877 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4878 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004879 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4880 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004881 *
4882 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004883 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004884 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004885void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4886 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004887
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004888/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004889 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4890 *
4891 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4892 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4893 *
4894 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4895 */
4896void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4897
4898/**
4899 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4900 *
4901 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4902 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4903 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4904 * while associating, for instance.
4905 *
4906 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4907 */
4908void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4909
4910/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004911 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4912 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4913 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4914 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4915 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4916 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4917 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4918 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004919 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004920 */
4921enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4922 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4923 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004924 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004925};
4926
4927/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004928 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4929 *
4930 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4931 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4932 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4933 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4934 *
4935 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4936 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4937 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4938 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4939 */
4940void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4941 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4942 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4943 void *data);
4944
4945/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004946 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004947 *
4948 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4949 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004950 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4951 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4952 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004953 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004954 *
4955 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004956 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004957 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004958 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4959 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004960static inline void
4961ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4962 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4964 void *data)
4965{
4966 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4967 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4968 iterator, data);
4969}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004970
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004971/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004972 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4973 *
4974 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4975 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4976 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4977 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004978 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004979 *
4980 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004981 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004982 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4983 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4984 */
4985void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004986 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004987 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4988 u8 *mac,
4989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4990 void *data);
4991
4992/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004993 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4994 *
4995 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4996 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4997 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4998 *
4999 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5000 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5001 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5002 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5003 */
5004void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5005 u32 iter_flags,
5006 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5007 u8 *mac,
5008 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5009 void *data);
5010
5011/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03005012 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5013 *
5014 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5015 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5016 * function for them.
5017 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5018 *
5019 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5020 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5021 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5022 */
5023void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5024 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5025 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5026 void *data);
5027/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005028 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5029 *
5030 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5031 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5032 *
5033 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5034 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5035 */
5036void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5037
5038/**
5039 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5040 *
5041 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5042 * workqueue.
5043 *
5044 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5045 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5046 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5047 */
5048void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5049 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5050 unsigned long delay);
5051
5052/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005053 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005054 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005055 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305056 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005057 *
5058 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005059 *
5060 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5061 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5062 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5063 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305064int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5065 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005066
5067/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005068 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005070 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5071 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5072 *
5073 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005074 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5075 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005076 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005077void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005078 u16 tid);
5079
5080/**
5081 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005082 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005083 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005084 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005085 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005086 *
5087 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5088 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5089 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5090 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005091int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005092
5093/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005094 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005095 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005096 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5097 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5098 *
5099 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005100 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5101 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005102 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005103void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005104 u16 tid);
5105
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005106/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005107 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5108 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005109 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005110 * @addr: station's address
5111 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005112 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5113 *
5114 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005115 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5116 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005117struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005118 const u8 *addr);
5119
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005120/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005121 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005122 *
5123 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005124 * @addr: remote station's address
5125 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005126 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005127 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5128 *
5129 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005130 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5131 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005132 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5133 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5134 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5135 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5136 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5137 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5138 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005139 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005140 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005141 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005142struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5143 const u8 *addr,
5144 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005145
5146/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005147 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5148 * @hw: the hardware
5149 * @pubsta: the station
5150 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5151 *
5152 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5153 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5154 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5155 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5156 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5157 *
5158 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5159 * manner.
5160 *
5161 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5162 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5163 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5164 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5165 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5166 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5167 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5168 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5169 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5170 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5171 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5172 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5173 * woke up while blocked or not.
5174 */
5175void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5176 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5177
5178/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005179 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5180 * @pubsta: the station
5181 *
5182 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5183 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5184 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5185 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5186 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005187 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5188 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5189 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5190 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5191 *
5192 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5193 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5194 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5195 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005196 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005197void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005198
5199/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005200 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5201 * @pubsta: the station
5202 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5203 *
5204 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5205 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5206 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5207 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5208 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5209 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5210 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5211 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5212 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5213 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5214 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5215 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5216 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5217 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5218 */
5219void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5220
5221/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005222 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5223 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5224 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5225 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5226 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5227 *
5228 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5229 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5230 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5231 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5232 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5233 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005234 *
5235 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5236 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5237 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005238 */
5239void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5240 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5241 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5242 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5243 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5244 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5245 void *data),
5246 void *iter_data);
5247
5248/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005249 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5250 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5251 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5252 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5253 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5254 *
5255 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5256 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5257 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5258 * in removal process will be skipped.
5259 *
5260 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5261 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5262 */
5263void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5265 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5267 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5268 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5269 void *data),
5270 void *iter_data);
5271
5272/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005273 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5274 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5275 * @iter: iterator function
5276 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5277 *
5278 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5279 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5280 * places while calling into the driver.
5281 *
5282 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5283 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5284 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005285 *
5286 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5287 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5288 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5289 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005290 */
5291void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5292 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5293 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5294 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5295 void *data),
5296 void *iter_data);
5297
5298/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005299 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5300 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5301 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5302 *
5303 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5304 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5305 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5306 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5307 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005308 * %NULL.
5309 *
5310 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005311 */
5312struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5313 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5314
5315/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005316 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5317 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005318 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005319 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005320 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005321 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005322 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5323 */
5324void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005325
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005326/**
5327 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5328 *
5329 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5330 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005331 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005332 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5333 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005334 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5335 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005336 *
5337 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5338 * without connection recovery attempts.
5339 */
5340void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5341
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005342/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005343 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5344 *
5345 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5346 *
5347 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5348 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5349 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5350 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5351 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5352 *
5353 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5354 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5355 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5356 * disconnect normally later.
5357 *
5358 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5359 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5360 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5361 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5362 */
5363void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5364
5365/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005366 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5367 * rssi threshold triggered
5368 *
5369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5370 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005371 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005372 * @gfp: context flags
5373 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005374 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005375 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5376 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5377 */
5378void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5379 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005380 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005381 gfp_t gfp);
5382
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005383/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005384 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5385 *
5386 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5387 * @gfp: context flags
5388 */
5389void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5390
5391/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005392 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5393 *
5394 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5395 */
5396void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5397
5398/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005399 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5401 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5402 *
5403 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5404 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5405 */
5406void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5407
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005408/**
5409 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5410 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005411 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005412 *
5413 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5414 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5415 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5416 */
5417void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5418 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5419
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005420/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005421 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5422 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5423 */
5424void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5425
5426/**
5427 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5428 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5429 */
5430void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5431
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005432/**
5433 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5434 *
5435 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5436 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5437 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5438 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5439 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5440 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5441 *
5442 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5443 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5444 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5445 */
5446void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5447 const u8 *addr);
5448
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005449/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005450 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5451 * @pubsta: station struct
5452 * @tid: the session's TID
5453 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5454 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5455 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5456 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5457 *
5458 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5459 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5460 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5461 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5462 */
5463void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5464 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5465 u16 received_mpdus);
5466
5467/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005468 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5469 *
5470 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5471 * buffer.
5472 *
5473 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5474 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5475 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5476 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5477 */
5478void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5479
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005480/**
5481 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5482 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5483 * @addr: station mac address
5484 * @tid: the rx tid
5485 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005486void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005487 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005488
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005489/**
5490 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5491 *
5492 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5493 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5494 * reordering.
5495 *
5496 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5497 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5498 *
5499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5500 * @addr: station mac address
5501 * @tid: the rx tid
5502 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005503static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5504 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5505{
5506 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5507 return;
5508 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5509}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005510
5511/**
5512 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5513 *
5514 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5515 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5516 * reordering.
5517 *
5518 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5519 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5520 *
5521 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5522 * @addr: station mac address
5523 * @tid: the rx tid
5524 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005525static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5526 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5527{
5528 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5529 return;
5530 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5531}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005532
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005533/**
5534 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5535 *
5536 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5537 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5538 *
5539 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5540 *
5541 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5542 * @addr: station mac address
5543 * @tid: the rx tid
5544 */
5545void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5546 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5547
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005548/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005549
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005550/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005551 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005552 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005553 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5554 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5555 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005556 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5557 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005558 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5559 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5560 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5561 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5562 * RTS threshold
5563 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5564 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005565 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005566 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005567 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005568 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005569struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5570 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5571 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5572 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5573 struct sk_buff *skb;
5574 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5575 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005576 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005577 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005578 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005579};
5580
5581struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005582 const char *name;
5583 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005584 void (*free)(void *priv);
5585
5586 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5587 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005588 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305590 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005591 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005592 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5593 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005594 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5595 void *priv_sta);
5596
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005597 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5598 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5599 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005600 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5601 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5602 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005603 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5604 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005605
5606 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5607 struct dentry *dir);
5608 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005609
5610 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005611};
5612
5613static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005614 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005615 int index)
5616{
5617 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5618}
5619
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005620/**
5621 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5622 *
5623 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5624 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5625 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5626 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5627 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5628 * not null.
5629 *
5630 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5631 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5632 *
5633 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5634 * that this may be null.
5635 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5636 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5637 */
5638bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5639 void *priv_sta,
5640 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5641
5642
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005643static inline s8
5644rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5646{
5647 int i;
5648
5649 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5650 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5651 return i;
5652
5653 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005654 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005655
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005656 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005657 return 0;
5658}
5659
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005660static inline
5661bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5662 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5663{
5664 unsigned int i;
5665
5666 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5667 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5668 return true;
5669 return false;
5670}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005671
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005672/**
5673 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5674 *
5675 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5676 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5677 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5678 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5679 *
5680 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5681 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5682 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5683 */
5684int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5685 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5686 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5687
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005688int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5689void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005690
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005691static inline bool
5692conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5693{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005694 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005695}
5696
5697static inline bool
5698conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5699{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005700 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5701 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005702}
5703
5704static inline bool
5705conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5706{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005707 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5708 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005709}
5710
5711static inline bool
5712conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5713{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005714 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005715}
5716
5717static inline bool
5718conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5719{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005720 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5721 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5722 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005723}
5724
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005725static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5726ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5727{
5728 if (p2p) {
5729 switch (type) {
5730 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5731 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5732 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5733 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5734 default:
5735 break;
5736 }
5737 }
5738 return type;
5739}
5740
5741static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5742ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5743{
5744 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5745}
5746
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005747/**
5748 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5749 *
5750 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5751 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5752 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5753 *
5754 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5755 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5756 * matching GroupId management frame.
5757 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5758 */
5759void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5760 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5761
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005762void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5763 int rssi_min_thold,
5764 int rssi_max_thold);
5765
5766void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005767
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005768/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005769 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005770 *
5771 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5772 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005773 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5774 *
5775 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5776 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005777 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005778int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5779
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005780/**
5781 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5782 * @vif: virtual interface
5783 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5784 * @gfp: allocation flags
5785 *
5786 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5787 */
5788void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5789 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5790 gfp_t gfp);
5791
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005792/**
5793 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5794 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5795 * @vif: virtual interface
5796 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5797 * @band: the band to transmit on
5798 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5799 *
5800 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5801 */
5802bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5804 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5805
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005806/**
5807 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5808 *
5809 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5810 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5811 *
5812 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5813 *
5814 * private:
5815 *
5816 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5817 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5818 */
5819struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5820 u32 next_tsf;
5821 bool has_next_tsf;
5822
5823 u8 absent;
5824
5825 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5826 struct {
5827 u32 start;
5828 u32 duration;
5829 u32 interval;
5830 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5831};
5832
5833/**
5834 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5835 *
5836 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5837 * @data: NoA tracking data
5838 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5839 *
5840 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5841 */
5842int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5843 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5844
5845/**
5846 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5847 *
5848 * @data: NoA tracking data
5849 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5850 */
5851void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5852
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005853/**
5854 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5855 * @vif: virtual interface
5856 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5857 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5858 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5859 * @gfp: allocation flags
5860 *
5861 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5862 */
5863void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5864 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5865 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005866
5867/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005868 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5869 *
5870 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5871 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5872 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5873 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5874 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5875 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5876 *
5877 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5878 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5879 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5880 *
5881 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5882 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5883 *
5884 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5885 */
5886int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5887
5888/**
5889 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5890 *
5891 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5892 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5893 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5894 *
5895 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5896 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5897 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5898 *
5899 * @sta: the station
5900 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5901 */
5902void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5903
5904/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005905 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5906 *
5907 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01005908 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005909 *
5910 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5911 */
5912struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5913 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005914
5915/**
5916 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5917 *
5918 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5919 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5920 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5921 *
5922 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5923 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5924 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5925 */
5926void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5927 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5928 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005929
5930/**
5931 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5932 *
5933 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5934 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5935 *
5936 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5937 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5938 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5939 * @gfp: allocation flags
5940 */
5941void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5942 u8 inst_id,
5943 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5944 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005945
5946/**
5947 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5948 *
5949 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5950 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5951 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5952 *
5953 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5954 * @match: match event information
5955 * @gfp: allocation flags
5956 */
5957void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5958 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5959 gfp_t gfp);
5960
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005961#endif /* MAC80211_H */